▼
Scroll to page 2
of 579
15D492-126-AD Fourth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. 2015 Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat Chrysler Group LLC 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 ! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 ! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 4 INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techvehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman- nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRODUCTION This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual: INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment. vehicle registration, and the title. INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS ! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ SRT Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ! ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ! VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 ! TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ! REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — ! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ! SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN ! WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 . . . . . . . .42 . . . . . . . .43 . . . . . . . .54 . . . . . . . .69 . . . . . . . .89 . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ! TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN). During start, ON/RUN will illuminate. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may feature. Refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™# in #Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put tion. the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) push to operate the ignition. This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 SRT Key Fobs NOTE: SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine comes with three key fobs (two red and one black) that allow for different engine power levels. Please refer to the #Drive Modes# in the “Uconnect Settings” section for further descriptions. The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) 1 — OFF 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 — ON/RUN The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster. NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine. After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In SENTRY KEY® addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds. is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. CAUTION! The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION! • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause underized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a sired operation. blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- by the party responsible for compliance could void the tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the user’s authority to operate the equipment. authorized dealer. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Customer Key Programming The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch performed at an authorized dealer. for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and General Information decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the foland with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, subject to the following conditions: the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the • This device may not cause harmful interference. instrument cluster will flash. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after 5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8 times. To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF” position (refer to #Starting Procedures# in #Starting And Operating# for further information). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF. • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the key is physically removed from the ignition. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. • Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™# in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further information). • Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. 3. If any doors are open, close them. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the following methods: the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless alarm will sound. Entry (RKE) transmitter. • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in #Things The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the information). system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF ously described arming sequences has occurred, the position. Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle NOTE: and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, • The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery Vehicle Security Alarm. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the To Disarm The System THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furTamper Alert ther information. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, your absence, the horn will sound three times and the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. NOTE: Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in doors using the manual door lock plunger. the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position). ILLUMINATED ENTRY • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door. dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position). 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters. Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current This feature lets you program the system to unlock either setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitFlash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH Instrument Panel” for further information. (24 km/h) or greater. To Unlatch The Trunk NOTE: Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before horn will remain on. Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one by the system. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters and the interior lights will turn on. Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer. Using The Panic Alarm THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. 2 NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the seal during removal. battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in step #2 for removal. General Information Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 • This device must accept any interference received, REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED including interference that may cause undesired operation. This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved niently from outside the vehicle while still by the party responsible for compliance could void the maintaining security. The system has a range of user’s authority to operate the equipment. approximately 300 ft (91 m). If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE: distance, check for these two conditions: 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. the battery is a minimum of three years. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range. tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • Shift lever in PARK • Doors closed • Hood closed • Hazard switch off • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) • Battery at an acceptable charge level • RKE PANIC button not pushed • System not disabled from previous remote start event • Vehicle security alarm not active • Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™) WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Vehicle cycle. Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. NOTE: • If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START then shut down 10 seconds later. button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Start request. Remote Start mode. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the in the Remote Start mode. doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the • The engine can be started two consecutive times with door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice push and release the START/STOP button. (or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- DOOR LOCKS Go™ feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will Manual Door Locks display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door you push the START button. trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door Cancel Remote Start lock knob on each door trim panel upward. Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur: • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm. • Any engine warning lights come on. • Low Fuel Light turns on. • The hood is opened. • The hazard switch is pushed. • The shift lever is moved out of PARK. • The brake pedal is pushed. Door Lock Knob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.” If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the ignition is either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound as a reminder. Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in your radio. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically if: NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ abled. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you returned to 0 mph (0 km/h). to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to 3. The transmission is in PARK. push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. 4. The driver door is opened. NOTE: 5. The doors were not previously unlocked. • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Unlock From The Passenger Side: With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk: Transmitter In Vehicle With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a of the deck lid, push the button located on the center of Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door license plate. unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors: With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors. Trunk Passive Entry Button NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door NOTE: handle button. This could unlock the door(s). • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE There is a single window control on the passenger’s door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s Power Windows door. The window controls will operate only when the The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position. the door windows. NOTE: WINDOWS • The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Power Window Switches • The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped The driver’s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. will reappear once the trunk is closed. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symsion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) bol will display until the trunk is closed. before the button will operate. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Trunk Release Button The trunk lid can be released from Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on outside the vehicle by pushing the trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. Trunk Release button on the ReTRUNK SAFETY WARNING mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or WARNING! by using the external release switch located on the underside of the Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, decklid overhang. The release fea- either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or ture will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING! (Continued) through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. Trunk Emergency Internal Release In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by activating the glow- OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechaSome of the most important safety features in your nism. vehicle are the restraint systems: • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Important Safety Precautions use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind possible. them or under their arm. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your risk of harm from a deploying air bag: child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved move the seat as far back as possible and use the back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Air Bags room to inflate. 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should be vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not between you and the door and you could be injured. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under #If You Need Assistance.# WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle and cargo is properly stowed. speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authoOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactiduration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. vating BeltAlert. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occudriver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and Lap/Shoulder Belts visual notification. All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active lap/shoulder belts. when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. (Continued) 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. (Continued) Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch Positioning The Lap Belt plate. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. the latch plate. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Extender WARNING! (Continued) If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper increase the risk of serious injury or death in a shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a lap belt is not long enough and only use in the Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used recommended seating positions. Remove and store only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. (Continued) We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Seat Belt Pretensioner Energy Management Feature The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor worn snugly and positioned properly. (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- For additional information, refer to “Installing Child straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position. a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a #click.# In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. (Continued) 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bag System Components • Knee Impact Bolsters • Advanced Front Air Bags • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Seat Belt Pretenioners • Seat Belt Buckle Switch • Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the system components: driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The • Air Bag Warning Light passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Steering Wheel and Column words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on • Instrument Panel the air bag covers. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides Advanced Front Air Bags. output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air sensors or other system components. bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, Advanced Front Air Bag Features The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Supplemental Side Air Bags Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” Knee Impact Bolsters label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags. WARNING! • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or seat belts and body structure. “AIRBAG.” When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. (Continued) 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy. Rollover Events NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approSide Impacts priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not determining the appropriate response to impact events. Side Air Bags should have deployed. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact event may be in progress and whether deployment is deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event. If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network bags will not be in place to protect you. remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine WARNING! whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions: protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Unlock the doors automatically. but they will open during air bag deployment. • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. functions after an event, the ignition must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds Air Bag Warning Light for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag The air bags must be ready to inflate for your Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malprotection in a collision. The Occupant Re- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup. System Reset Procedure The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this manual. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! 2 • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE: children from newborn size to the child almost large • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resiOwner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instrucadditional information: tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/ and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt vehicle’s seat belt alone: out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child the vehicle seat? correctly. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the WARNING! way back? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt between their neck and arm? will not protect a child properly, which may result in 4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? correctly. 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 2 • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Center only may be removed. Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. Tether Strap Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head Always follow the directions of the child restraint restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to all child restraint systems will be installed as described move it to its rear-most position to make room for the here. child seat. You may also move the front seat forward To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint to allow more room for the child seat. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatbelt, following the instructions below. See the section ing position. “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING! (Continued) • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes No Yes Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Center Only may be removed Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. 2 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of position. For some second row seats, you may need to the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the rear-most position to make room for the child seat. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. You may also move the front seat forward to allow 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is more room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. to pass it through the seat belt path of the child 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt lap portion around the child restraint while you push path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a vehicle seat. “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path Tether Strap Mounting for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. side of the head restraint. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly WARNING! injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision. increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SRT Engine Break-In Recommendations: The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle. Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval. 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow- 100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km): ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in • Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more period: than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower 0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km): gears (1st to 3rd gears). • Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an • Avoid aggressive braking. extended period of time. • Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM. • Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more • Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration. observe local speed limits. • Avoid aggressive braking. 300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km): • Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM. • Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually • Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and (paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible. observe local speed limits. • Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle. • Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 For the first 1500 mi (2414 km): SAFETY TIPS • Do not participate in track events, sport driving Transporting Passengers schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO (2414 km). AREA. NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if WARNING! necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through the first oil change interval. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a able. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately. lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Tires Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 ! BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .103 ▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment 3 . . .112 . . .118 . . .120 . . .121 . . .121 . . .122 . . .124 . . .125 . . .126 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .135 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . ▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .136 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 . . . . . .142 . . . . . .143 . . . . . .143 . . . . . .143 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .145 ! TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .146 ! POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 ! HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ! ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .156 ▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .157 ▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .163 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ! PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .167 ▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .168 ▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . ▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .170 ▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . ▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . ▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 . . . .181 . . . .182 . . . .182 . . . .182 . . . .187 . . . .188 . . . .189 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .189 ! PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ! OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ! GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .194 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .195 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .199 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ! POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .203 ▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .204 ! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Glove Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ! REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 ▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. • Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On. • Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing. The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned Automatic Dimming Mirror On or Off through the touchscreen. If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues. operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror. manual” for further information. ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers: NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off. • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. 2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance. buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a • Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: • Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. • The vehicle brand. • The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed. NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection. 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. WARNING! • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. (Continued) 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. (Continued) 9-1-1 Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities. 9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: • The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 • The Phone Screen will display the following message “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.” • An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.” WARNING! • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately. Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors: • Delayed accessories mode is active. • The ignition is in the OFF position. • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. • The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash. • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) are unavailable or obstructed. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. • Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. CAUTION! • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. • Wireless network congestion. • Weather. • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. 3 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards the front of the vehicle. Folding Mirrors 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the door trim panel. mirror that you want to adjust. Power Mirrors NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Power Mirror Controls These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Close the mirror cover to turn off the light. Illuminated Vanity Mirror “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarvisor and pull rearward. based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. Slide-On-Rod Extender Rear Detection Zones UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. Automatic Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. Manual Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake BSM Warning Light is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane vehicle is stationary. width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function NOTE: properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumrapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). tection zones. The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information. other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an time the vehicle is in a forward gear. alert during these types of zone entries. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Overtaking/Approaching The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. 3 Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path — If Equipped Opposing Traffic WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM (Continued) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an Three selectable modes of operation are available in the alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further intime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In formation. addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will Blind Spot Alert Lights Only be reduced. When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE: system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM view mirror based on a detected object. However, when system, the radio volume is reduced. the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible the appropriate visual alert only. alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the Modes Of Operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no eration of the device. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP Changes or modifications to any of these systems by systems. other than an authorized service facility could void NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating authorization to use this equipment. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS used. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the General Information vehicle. This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency WARNING! that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in Operation is subject to the following two conditions: these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. Blind Spot Alert Off (Continued) 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Power Seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat. Power Seat Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull raise and lower the position of the support. upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Power Lumbar Switch 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Front Heated Seats — If Equipped The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. • Press the heated seat button setting ON. once to turn the High • Press the heated seat button the Low setting ON. a second time to turn • Press the heated seat button the heating elements OFF. a third time to turn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher On models that are equipped with remote start, the ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a HI and LO. remote start. The front ventilated seats control buttons are located This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understandcontrol buttons through the climate screen or the controls ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. screen. once to choose HI. Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment • Press the ventilated seat button The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or choose LO. rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearturn the ventilated seat OFF. ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. 3 Manual Front Seatback Recline To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Seat Easy Entry On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating position, first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set lock position. Easy Entry Lever Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING! return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately. The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. 3 Active Head Restraints — Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button The AHRs will automatically return to their normal 3 — Seat Belt Loop position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not Head Restraint 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjustment button and release button. Then adjust it to the appropriate height. WARNING! • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. 3 Folded Rear Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. Folding Rear Seat 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood. 3 Hood Safety Catch Hood Safety Catch Location 3. Push the safety catch to the left. CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should (Continued) 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, and interior lights. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. LIGHTS Headlight Switch Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent The headlight switch is located on the left side of for parking light and instrument panel light operation. the instrument panel. This switch controls the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for Headlights On With Wipers (Available With headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- Automatic Headlights Only) eration. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is Automatic Headlights — If Equipped placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature This system automatically turns the headlights on or off is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the this feature. AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Feasystem off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for position. further information. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic High Beam — If Equipped • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition off. The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp vehicle is out of view. Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized NOTE: dealer. • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be To Activate turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position. ment Panel” for further information. • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode. remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). lens will cause the system to function improperly. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 To Deactivate If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay. 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. operation of low beams). 2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” system. in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further Headlight Time Delay information. This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the unlit area. engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the engine is shut Off. headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Lights-On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened. Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Multifunction Lever signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The Turn Signals multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows steering column. on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released. (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to Lane Change Assist pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond will shut off. the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash Map/Reading Lights three times then automatically turn off. These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Lights transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is The interior lights come on when a door is opened. turned fully upward, past the second detent. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel. Overhead Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 3 Dimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped). Instrument Panel Dimmer Dome Light Position Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first The multifunction lever operates the windshield detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction settings for high-speed wiper operation. lever is located on the left side of the steering column. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 CAUTION! Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off. Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- windshield. The wash function must be used in order to tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- spray the windshield with washer fluid. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the Windshield Washers end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second washer spray is desired. to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Intermittent Wiper System 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers (Available With and then resume the intermittent interval previously Automatic Headlights Only) selected. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when and then turn off. the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe cycles within 60 seconds. In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no wipes occurs in 240 Seconds. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for OFF position when not using the system. further information. NOTE: Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the This feature senses moisture on the windshield and wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate shield. the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature. • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. following conditions: Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column perature is greater than 32°F (0°C). upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- located below the steering wheel at the end of the TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not steering column. operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull on when the steering wheel is already warm. the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as The heated steering wheel control button is located desired. within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls WARNING! screen. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Ad- • Press the heated steering wheel button once to justing the steering column while driving or driving turn the heating element ON. with the steering column unlocked, could cause the a second driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow • Press the heated steering wheel button time to turn the heating element OFF. this warning may result in serious injury or death. HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED Instrument Panel” for further information. When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph WARNING! (40 km/h). • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 — ON/OFF 2 — SET+/ACCEL 3 — RESUME 4 — SET-/DECEL 5 — CANCEL Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button. 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. the new set speed will be established. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET - button. • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): the new set speed will be established. U.S. Speed (mph) Metric Speed (km/h) • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h button results in a decrease of 1 mph. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. the new set speed will be established. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h Control. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h) • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling The Cruise Control system has two control modes: on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles. Electronic Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter. • Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional informaACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant Mode” in this section. need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode NOTE: selected. • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. buttons. The two control modes function differently. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will Always confirm which mode is selected. apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • The ACC system: • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. • Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. You should switch off the ACC system: • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. (Continued) 3 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system. Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF — SET+/ACCEL — RESUME — SET-/DECEL — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE — CANCEL UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions: Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System. • When you apply the brakes. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When the parking brake is set. You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE20 mph (32 km/h). VERSE or NEUTRAL. The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. below 15 mph (24 km/h). The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the brakes are overheated. (32 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC Ready.” When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” • When the ESC is in Full-off mode. 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” “ACC Ready.” To Activate/Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired ACC Speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the DID. • The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the To Cancel SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID The following conditions cancel the system: will display the set speed. If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above • The brake pedal is applied. 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current • The CANCEL button is pressed. speed of the vehicle. • The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h). • An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Resume Drive position. If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The DID will display the last set speed. tem (ESC/TCS) activates. • The vehicle parking brake is applied. • A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. • The driver switches ESC to full-off mode. To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if: • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pressed. • The ignition is turned off. WARNING! The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pressed. pressing the SET + button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Undercontinue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen in the DID. speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Decrease Speed U.S. Speed (mph) While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph pressing the SET - button. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in an increase of 1 mph. instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): in the DID. U.S. Speed (mph) Metric Speed (km/h) • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h button results in a decrease of 1 mph. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle button is released. The decrease in set speed is resufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system flected in the DID. will automatically slow the vehicle. Metric Speed (km/h) • The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph (24 km/h) when following a target vehicle. • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will may occur while climbing uphill or descending downcontinue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainbutton is released. The decrease in set speed is retain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the flected in the DID. ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature NOTE: exceeds normal range (overheated). • When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the DID. 3 Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setspeed. ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. (longer). • The distance setting is changed. 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound Brake Alert while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for capacity. the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Overtake Aid Adaptive Cruise Control Off When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left or right turn signal. The Overtake Aid will only provide additional acceleration if the vehicle moves with the corresponding turn signal and until the current set speed is reached. The ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction in the respective lane when the right or left turn signal is utilized. When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID: ACC SET When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster. DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC information it displays depends on ACC system status. activity occurs, which may include any of the following: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ • System Cancel OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of • Driver Override the following displays in the DID: 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • System Off • ACC Proximity Warning • ACC Unavailable Warning dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/ FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate. The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” • The DID will return to the last display selected after message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or five seconds of no ACC display activity ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the Display Warnings And Maintenance vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” this warning may temporarily occur. Warning The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise conditions temporarily limit system performance. Control is still available. For additional information refer This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section. in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or vehicle behind the lower grille. malfunction. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no tant to note the following maintenance items: longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the simply reactivating it. sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. NOTE: • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than require a sensor realignment. once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due your authorized dealer. to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service. 3 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. Service ACC/FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Offset Driving Condition Example Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once Turn Or Bend Example 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. ACC Hill Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Lane Changing Example Narrow Vehicle Example 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). WARNING! In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. To change between the different control modes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conreached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or trol mode. SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- U.S. Speed (mph) TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the speed control is SET. button results in an increase of 1 mph. To Vary The Speed Setting • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will To Increase Speed continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conin the DID display. trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET + button. Metric Speed (km/h) The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. button results in an increase of 1 km/h. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed button is released. The decrease in set speed is reof U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: flected in the DID display. U.S. Speed (mph) To Cancel • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory: button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied. continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pressed. button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display. tem (ESC/TCS) activates. 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The vehicle parking brake is applied. • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pressed. • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated). FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the EQUIPPED Drive position. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation To Resume Speed The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings and release. Resume can be used at any speed above (within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to 20 mph (32 km/h). provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or To Turn Off mitigate the potential collision. The system will turn off and erase the set speed in NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward memory if: looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is ON/OFF button is pressed. probable, the driver will be provided with audible and • The ignition is turned off. visual warnings. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. NOTE: • The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph (10 km/h). • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. FCW Message • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. 3 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. Turning FCW ON Or OFF To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off). Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows Changing FCW Status the system to warn you of a possible collision with the The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through vehicle in front of you. the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in The forward collision button is located on the switch “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inpanel below the Uconnect® display. formation. To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting is the “On” button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on). setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are Service FCW Warning farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to If the system turns off, and the DID displays: avoid a possible collision. Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required the system to warn you of a possible collision with the • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. the system checked by an authorized dealer. NOTE: PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF • The system will retain the last setting selected by the EQUIPPED driver after ignition shut down. The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as and audible indications of the distance between the rear overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sysoncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of higher rate of speed. this system and recommendations. • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if changed to the ON/RUN position. Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect® ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandREVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual above. The system will become active again if the vehicle warnings to indicate the distance between the rear speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to 6 mph (9 km/h). “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding ParkSense® Sensors Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. ParkSense® Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to continuous. 3 Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: 3 Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Distance (in/cm) Audible Alert Chime Arc — Left Rear Arc — Center Rear Greater than 79 in (200 cm) None 79-59 in (200-150 cm) WARNING ALERTS 59-47 in 47-39 in (150-120 (120-100 cm) cm) 39-25 in (100-65 cm) 25-12 in (65-30 cm) Less than 12 in (30 cm) Slow (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Fast (for rear center only) Fast Continuous None Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear center only) None None None None 1st Flashing None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Arc — Right Rear Radio Volume Reduced None None None None None No Yes Yes Yes Yes 2nd Flashing Yes 1st Flashing Yes 3 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display. ParkSense® Switch 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When the ParkSense® system is disabled, the Drivers Information Display (DID) will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® Panel” for further information. switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system is dis- system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver abled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will Information Display (DID) will display the blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON. “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- ParkSense® System Usage Precautions SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID), NOTE: make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operor other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the ating properly. message continues to appear see an authorized dealer. If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense® or render the appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer. system temporarily unavailable. Cleaning The ParkSense® System • When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instruClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap ment cluster will display #PARKSENSE OFF# for five and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damit remains off until you turn it on again, even if you age the sensors. cycle the ignition. • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. 3 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding an audio tone. CAUTION! • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper. • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®. • Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID). WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 WARNING! (Continued) carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into #PARK# or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to last touchscreen appears again. 3 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its the vehicle. projected backup path based on the steering wheel The following table shows the approximate distances for position. each zone: Zone Red Yellow Green Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may also be included, if equipped. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Overhead Console 3 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy/Reading Lights GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED At the forward end of the overhead console are two HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters courtesy/reading lights. that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorPress the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt to turn off the light. battery. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is console designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located on the left side turned fully upward past the second detent. of the first button. Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a #push/push# design. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. NOTE: • Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secuerase channels when programming additional buttons. rity Alarm is active. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage HomeLink.com for information or assistance. before you begin programming. HomeLink® Buttons 3 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed. transmitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiHomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the activates, programming is complete. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to from slow to rapid. complete the training. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. attached to the garage door opener/device motor. 3 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, light in view. follow these steps: 3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. program while you push and hold the hand-held 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until transmitter button. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button. cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps. lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. before 1995. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling Code) Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® follow these steps: to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time-out in the same manner. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling not release the button. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor. ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. remaining steps. 3 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time. cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button fully trained. (Canadian/Gate Operator) 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take follow these steps: up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do and observe the indicator light. not release the button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. follow all remaining steps. Troubleshooting Tips Using HomeLink® If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, To operate, push and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions: HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater. tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. also be used at any time. • Did you unplug the device for programming and Security remember to plug it back in? It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you have any problems, or require assistance, please in your vehicle. call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 HomeLink.com for information or assistance. seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. 3 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING! • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. (Continued) 3 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. Closing Sunroof — Express Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any Opening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof. open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Pinch Protect Feature Sunshade Operation This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. Wind Buffeting NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Venting Sunroof — Express open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the front windows open, open the front windows tocalled “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. minimize the buffeting or open any window. 3 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunroof Maintenance ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp) the glass panel. power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accesIgnition Off Operation sories. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is The 12 Volt power outlets have power available at all turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door times. These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. will cancel this feature. NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ knob and element must be used. Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding The front power outlet is located next to the storage area Your Instrument Panel” for further information. on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 3 Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front Power Outlet — Center Console NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack 2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. (Continued) 3 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows. The front cupholders are located in the center console. Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. 3 Opened Glove Compartment Console Storage Glove Compartment The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12 Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI). 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision. REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster Center Console The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 3 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .218 ! Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .219 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .221 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ! DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .230 ▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 ▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ DID Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 ▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 ▫ Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT . . .272 ▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 ▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ! Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .306 ! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 ! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 ▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 ! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .308 ▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .309 ! CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 ▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .318 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ! Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 ▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 ▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 ▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .331 ▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .335 ▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 2 3 4 — Air Outlets — Instrument Cluster — Glove Box — Media Center 5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button 6 — Trunk Release Button 7 — Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT 4 Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after 1. Tachometer engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL The red segments indicate the maximum permissible stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red not require towing. area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L CAUTION! redline = 6400 RPM. Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator 2. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of control system. It also could affect fuel economy and an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic OBD system monitors engine and automatic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when Immediate service is required. the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 3. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped 4. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. NOTE: • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security 5. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System until the vehicle is disarmed. (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 6. Driver Information Display (DID) Area NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- The DID features an interactive display, for further vidual trip mileage. information refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).” 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Gear Status Indicator — Automatic Transmission 9. Brake Warning Light Only This light monitors various brake functions, The Gear Status Indicator is self-contained within the including brake fluid level and parking brake instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the application. If the brake light turns on it may automatic transmission. indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light the anti-lock brake system reservoir. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as If the light remains on when the parking brake has been a bulb check when the ignition switch is first disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuremain on until the condition has been corrected. ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re- The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacstraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is hicle” for further information. indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked. proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is sary. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 4 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10. Air Bag Warning Light 13. High Beam Indicator This light will turn on for four to eight seconds This indicator will turn on when the high beam as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to either not on during starting, stays on, or turns high beam. on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 14. Park/Headlight ON Indicator rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant This indicator will illuminate when the park Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your lights or headlights are turned on. Vehicle” for further information. 11. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 12. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 15. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 16. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range for a fully warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 17. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not tires). operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly. not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. 18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track or Full OFF. 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interproblem diagnosed and corrected. active display which is located in the instrument cluster. NOTE: • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. Driver Information Display (DID) Display This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The The system allows the driver to select information by DID Menu Items consists of the following: pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel: • Speedometer • Vehicle Info • Performance 4 • Driver Assist — If Equipped • Fuel Economy • Trip • Audio • Messages • Screen Setup • Speed Warning — If Equipped • Diagnostics — If Equipped • Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped DID Controls 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Up And Down Arrow Buttons: • Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous scrolling. Using the Up or Down arrows allows you to cycle through the Main Menu Items. • Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen viewed within that main menu will be disChanges the Main Screen area and Menu Title played. area. OK Button: For Digital Speedometer Left And Right Arrow Buttons: • Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h). Using the Left or Right arrow buttons allows For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings: you to cycle through the submenu items of the • OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. Main menu item. NOTE: • Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will allow the user to select the item of interest. • Holding the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow buttons will loop the user through the cur- • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to rently selected menu or options presented the 1st page of the submenu). on the screen. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 • Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To layer and return to the main menu. turn off the message temporarily, push and release the For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new PerforOK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after mance Timers): performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the • Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK following procedure. button. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Engine Oil Life Reset 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times will display in the DID for five seconds after a single within 10 seconds. chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE change interval. The engine oil change indicator system START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change OFF/LOCK position. interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Oil Change Required 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you 2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not downward through the main menu to “ Vehicle Info.” reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life the ”Oil Life” screen. Screen In The DID And Holding Ok 4. Push and hold the OK button until the “ Oil Life” Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change screen displays. indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the DID display for approximately 10 5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “ Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the reset of the Oil Life. next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 6. Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent submenu screen. upon your personal driving style. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not procedure(s): reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Cruise Control This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include: • Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the • Cruise Ready collision. For further information, refer to This telltale will illuminate white to indicate “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is The Features Of Your Vehicle.” activated. • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator • Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will turn on to indicate the windThis telltale will illuminate green when the shield washer fluid is low. electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your • Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped Vehicle.” This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further inforDID Yellow Telltales mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of tales. These telltales include: Your Vehicle.” 4 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Power This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further LaneSense Departure has detected a failure. information. • LaneSense Failure Telltale • Service AWD Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required. DID Red Telltales NOTE: • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales. • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service. These telltales include: • Power Steering System Over Temperature — If Equipped If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs • Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 • Decklid Ajar This light will turn on to indicate the decklid may be ajar. • Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If • Oil Pressure Warning Light the charging system light remains on, it means that the This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging light should turn on momentarily when the engine is system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an austarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop the thorized dealer. vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.” on. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light informs you of a problem with the This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the • Air Bag Warning Light engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the This light will turn on for four to eight seconds vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is If the light remains lit with the engine running, your either not on during starting, stays on, or turns vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your required. You may experience reduced performance, an Vehicle” for further information. elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle • Speed Limit Warning Light may require towing. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow • Oil Temperature Warning Light button until the Speed Limit Warning Menu This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and high. If the light turns on while driving, stop release OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as DOWN arrow to select a desired speed, then push and possible. release OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 (MSA) Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID, and a chime will sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed is exceeded. • Transmission Temperature Warning Light WARNING! If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on, DID Selectable Menu Items stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off. the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID. CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired. Speedometer Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to toggle between the Speedometer display type. 4 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle Info Engine Torque Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items: Engine Power Tire Pressure Monitor Performance Features Coolant Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Oil Pressure Oil Life Battery Voltage Intake Air Temp Air-Fuel Ratio — 6.2L Supercharged Boost Pressure — 6.2L Supercharged Intercooler Water Temp — 6.2L Supercharged WARNING! Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 WARNING! (Continued) exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. – Last – Current – Reaction Timer • 1/8 Mile (200 meters)Timer – Best – Last Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Under– Current standing Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/SubMenu selectable items and navigation. – Reaction Timer The Performance Features include the following: • 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer – Best – Last – Current – Reaction Timer • 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer – Best • 1/4 Mile (400 meters)Timer – Best – Last – Current – Reaction Timer • Braking Distance – Distance – From Speed 4 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Current G-Forces • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds. • Lap Timer • To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for two seconds. • Peak G-Forces • Lap History – Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in green. When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for • Top Speed the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) within 20 seconds. The following describes each feature and its operation: • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) 0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for conditions are met for the event to begin. the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 10 seconds. 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds. • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 • To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to 1/4 Mile (400 Meters) 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the button for two seconds. vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters). 1/8 Mile (200 Meters) When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condivehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile. tions are met for the event to begin. • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condimile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds. tions are met for the event to begin. • To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run, • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 push and hold the OK button for two seconds. mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds. Braking Distance • To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking push and hold the OK button for five seconds. distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed. 4 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • This feature will only function when applying the Peak G-Force brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force • Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature. values (two lateral and two longitudinal). • The word “READY” will display when conditions are • When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the met for the event to begin. G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. • The distance and speed measurements display while • Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force the event is taking place. values. • The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com- Lap Timer plete stop. When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer • Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset). current and last run values. Current G-Force • Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0. When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force • When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordingly. (lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of the forces. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 • As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the • Each time the driver presses the OK button (while on “current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates 0:00.00. the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down. • If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “cur- • Color will indicate the time that is the best time from rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed the Timer Page. in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON • Holding the OK button only resets the page you are position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible). on. • Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current • Lap History page is a static display of lap times only. time populates, the Last time and also populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current Top Speed time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button. When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since • The timer will stop when the driver navigates away last reset: from this page. • Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here Lap History unless/until the driver resets the screen. When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time that is the best time from the • Latching over ignition cycles. Timer Page. • Units will change with the global change in units. 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Driver Assist Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID: ACC SET The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status. When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster. OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: the following displays in the DID: Adaptive Cruise Control Off • Distance Setting Change When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- • tive Cruise Control Off.” • Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • Control Ready.” System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning • The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” – Average MPG (or L/100 km) – The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements LaneSense — If Equipped • Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves. The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys- • MPG will have the gauge fill from the left (clockwise). tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” • L/100 km will have the gauge fill from the right (counter clockwise). in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” • Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. Fuel Economy Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. • Two sub menu pages one with Current value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed: – Current MPG (or L/100 km) – Range (miles or km) 4 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until what the stored messages are. the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information Screen Setup will display the following: Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and • Distance release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen • Average Fuel Economy Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location • Elapsed Time that information is displayed. Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Diagnostics — If Equipped Audio Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able the Audio Menu displays in the DID. to view engine and emission vehicle faults. Stored Messages • Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This Trip Info UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 • There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped requested during which the following message is The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on displayed: vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The • “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.” PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within • Driver must push the OK button again to see the next the DID display when the driver configured gear shift Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed. point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating. • Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up This indication notifies the driver to change gear corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When or down). the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is • Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest. advising the driver to engage a higher gear. • If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated - when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions from the beginning. return to a situation where changing gear is not required, • When no codes are present or the last code is reached corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. = (P0000) and this message is displayed: • “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.” 4 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect® SETTINGS The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Faceplate 1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® display. Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on. Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4 Settings Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information. Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system. NOTE: • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. 4 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings • Display Mode may vary. When in this display you may select one of the auto When making a selection, press the button on the touch- display settings. To change Mode status, press and rescreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen. mode, press and release the preferred setting until a Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on even though the headlights are on. the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the • Display Brightness With Headlights ON screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the When in this display, you may select the brightness with available settings. the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and Display “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the the following settings will be available: touchscreen. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with • Set Theme — If Equipped Headlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or display screen. The theme will change the background #parade# positions. color, highlight color, and button color of the display • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF screen. When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. • Set Language When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lanNOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark Headlights OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and appears next to the language, showing that setting has the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch#parade# positions. screen to return to the previous menu. 4 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Touchscreen Beep When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below: • Speed Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 • Distance Select from: “mi” or “km.” • Fuel Consumption After the desired setting has been selected, press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Voice Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the “km/L.” following settings will be available: • Pressure • Voice Response Length Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.” • Temperature Select from: “°C,” or “°F.” • Power Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.” • Torque Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.” When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Show Command List When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List 4 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Set Time Hours • Sync Time With GPS This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or Clock down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the return to the previous menu. following settings will be available: • Set Time Minutes This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Time Format This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs • Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return audible and/or visual warning to potential forward to the previous menu. collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far” previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchbutton. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. screen. Safety & Driving Assistance For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConAfter pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Vehicle”. able: 4 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). zone start point. When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make hicle”. your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further The amount of directional torque the steering system can information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” Your Vehicle.” For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steersystem function and operating information. ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide • Front ParkSense® Volume greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make previous menu. your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button • Steering Feel Options — If Equipped on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It known configuration state through ignition cycles. will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the • ParkSense® 4 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make • Blind Spot Alert your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and known configuration state through ignition cycles. will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. • Rear ParkSense® Volume • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 “Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears the back arrow button on the touchscreen. next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in to return to the previous menu. the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and in the BSM not operating to specification. the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the • ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. “PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the display along with a caution note to “check entire sur“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings” roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secbutton on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” 4 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL “Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch- setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on screen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF. the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available. • Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function back button on the faceplate. and operating information. To make your selection, press • Headlight Illumination On Approach the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. • Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Doors & Locks menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. • Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When #Driver Door# is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When #All Doors# is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. 4 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter). setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If Equipped This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the • Passive Entry touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles showing that setting has been selected. Press the back door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous (RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the • Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped touchscreen the following settings will be available: When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will previous menu. turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With 4 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back When this feature is selected, the power window arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped), menu. DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to Audio 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the either front door will cancel this feature. To change the following settings will be available. Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time • Balance/Fade interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the • Headlight Off Delay previous menu. When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds • Equalizer • Engine Off Power Delay when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch- back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the screen to return to the previous menu. previous menu. NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped finger up or down to change the setting as well as press This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level directly on the desired setting. for portable devices connected through the AUX input. • Speed Adjusted Volume To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3. This feature increases or decreases volume relative to Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume to the previous menu. press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return • Loudness — If Equipped to the previous menu. Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” menu. • Surround Sound — If Equipped 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone/Bluetooth® SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchtouchscreen the following settings will be available: screen, the following settings will be available: • Paired Phones • Channel Skip This feature shows which phones are paired to the SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the • Paired Audio Sources touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the followed by pressing the back arrow button on the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer touchscreen. to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. • Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating #settings to access the Subscription Information screen. reset to default.# Press the okay button on the touchscreen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To to exit. reactivate your service, either call the number listed on Clear Personal Data the screen or visit the provider online. NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be availand is available for U.S. residents only. able: Restore Settings • Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove touchscreen the following settings will be available: personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” • Restore Settings button and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, To restore the settings to their default setting, press the a pop up appears stating #Personal data cleared”. Press Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the #Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” previous menu. 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Due to the extreme conditions encountered durAfter pressing the “System Information” button on the ing track use, any damage or wear associated with track touchscreen the following information will be available: use is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they • System Information will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving When System Information is selected, a System Informa- situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates tion screen will appear displaying the system software in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event. version. Prior to each track event/day: Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT • Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifiWARNING! cations. Always drive carefully within your capabilities. • Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½ Never drive in a reckless or dangerous manner, the original pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of require changing, please burnish prior to track outing others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can at full pace. Refer to “Track Burnishing Your Brakes.” prevent accidents. System Information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended that a brake bleed procedure be performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo High Performance brake system. Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and brake system. This increased operating temperature may affect Noise Vibration Harshness (NVH) countermeasures deIt is recommended that each track outing end with a signed into your vehicle. New components may need to minimum of one cool down lap using minimal braking. be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance. Change the differential and manual transmission fluid after every five hours of track use. Refer to “Maintaining Recommended tire pressure for track use: • Challenger/Charger: 40 psi hot, 32 psi front, 30 psi rear Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifications. cold If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it for track use during Track Burnishing Your Brakes warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake powertrain and cooling system components. pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endur- installed components or when new brake friction comance, however, it is recommended that the suspension ponents are installed: system, brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots 1. Utilize one track session to burnish brakes by driving should be inspected for wear or damage after every track at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 – 0.80g Max event. without ABS intervention. 4 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then brake pads start smelling in the next track session, do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applicareduce speed and braking deceleration to burnish tion. Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, targets and follow steps 2 through 4. do another cool down lap. 7. New brake pads installed on old rotors still need to be 3. Do not continue for more than one full burnishing lap burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them be burnished at the track, or street driven for 300 city smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and will miles, to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on negatively affect their life in future track use. the rotor surface prior to track use. 4. Allow the vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be releast 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is availplaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, able, allow the rotors to cool to 200° F (93.3° C) before as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal going back out. capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of 5. There should be a thin, ashy layer when inspecting the pulsation in further track use. pads installed in the caliper. If the ash layer is more than ½ the thickness of the brake pad material, this is an indication of too aggressive of a burnish. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 SRT Performance Pages Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators, as received from the Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time. WARNING! (Continued) roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive Modes. Press the desired button on the touchscreen to The Performance Pages include the following: access that specific Performance Page. • Home WARNING! Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public (Continued) • Timers • Digital Gauge 1 • Digital Gauge 2 • G-Force • Engine 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The following describes each feature and its operation: Home When Home is selected, the following features will be available: • A series of six images which can be selected by the user. • A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images. • A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature. SRT Performance Pages — Home UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following “Tickets”: Timers • Current Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of the performance timers. • Last Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of performance timers. • Best Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run of performance timers, except for braking data. SRT Performance Pages — Timers 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button to save runs to the jump drive. • Save Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run. Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save runs to the SD Card. feature is listed below: • Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the Owner web page. • Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket.” The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below: • Reaction Time Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID). SRT Performance Pages — “Save” NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛, and ¼ Mile timers will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 • 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) • Brake Distance Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h). stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start – from speed. • 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a 100 mph (0 to 160 km/h). complete stop. • ⅛ Mile (200 meter) • Brake Speed Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the (200 meters). brake pedal is depressed. • ¼ mile (400 meter) NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only disDisplays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile play #ready# when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 (400 meters). MPH (48 km/h). 4 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Gauges 1 SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Automatic Transmission) SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Manual Transmission) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 When selected, this screen displays the following values: • Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature. • Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure. 4 • Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature. • Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage. • Trans Oil Temp (Auto Transmission Only) SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L) When selected, this screen displays the following values: Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature. • Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature. • Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature. 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure. Gauges 2 SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Automatic Transmission) When selected, this screen displays the following values: • Battery Voltage SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Manual Transmission) Shows the actual battery voltage. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 • Intake Air Temperature When selected, this screen displays the following values: • Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission Only) Shows the current value for boost pressure. Shows the actual transmission temperature. Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio. Shows the actual intake air temperature. • Boost Pressure • Air Fuel Ratio • Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature. • Intake Air Temperature Shows the actual intake air temperature. SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L) 4 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When G-Force is selected, the following features will be available: G-Force • Lateral G-Force Left and Right The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right force of the vehicle. • Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and braking force of the vehicle. • Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right SRT Performance Pages — G-Force When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle. This shows the maximum g-forces that have been achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until they are cleared by the driver. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 • Vehicle Speed Engine Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum value. • Steering Wheel Angle 4 Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero. The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right. When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.4L Automatic Transmission) 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts Shows the instantaneous horsepower. • Instantaneous Torque Shows the instantaneous torque. • Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) Shows the actual oil pressure. • Gear (Automatic Transmission Only) SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.2L Automatic Transmission) Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the vehicle. • Boost Pressure (6.2L Only) When selected, this screen displays the following values: Shows the actual boost pressure. • Vehicle Speed Shows the actual vehicle speed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 SRT Drive Modes Key FOB 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine’s output, and allows the driver to select from two power levels within Drive Modes Set-Up. 4 Red Key FOB Black Key FOB If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged engine, it will support an additional engine power level Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced engine output. This information is also available within configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled SRT Drive Modes menu. through the Uconnect® radio and may be accessed by performing any of the following: Drive Modes • Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank. • Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “SRT & Apps” menu. • Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance Pages menu. NOTE: Not all options listed in this manual are available on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available Drive Mode vehicle configurations. Drive Modes Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature which allows for coordinating the operation of various UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Engine/ Transmission 6.2L Auto 6.2L Manual 6.4L Auto 6.4L Manual Red Key/ 700+ HP Black Key/ 500 HP Transmission Paddle Shifters Suspension Steering Traction X X X X X N/A X N/A X X N/A N/A X X N/A N/A N/A N/A X N/A X N/A X X X X X X 4 The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate the actual status of each system, along with a graphic that displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow “Street.” If the system status shown does not match the current drive mode set up, a message will be displayed indicating which values are not matching the current mode and why. NOTE: ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the Drive Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off button on the instrument panel switch bank for five seconds. 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Listed below are the available Drive Modes: Track Mode Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The Paddle Shifters are enabled. Sport Mode Drive Modes (Track) Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical track driving. The Drive Modes (Sport) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will Default Mode activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving. The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled. 4 Drive Modes (Default) The vehicle will start in Default Mode unless Valet mode is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions where the Traction and Transmission will be operating in their Street settings, which cannot be changed while in 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL this mode. The Steering and Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,” “Sport,” or “Track” modes and the Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode. Custom Mode Custom Mode The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two times, or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom configuration that is saved for quick selection of your favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the Horsepower, Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and Paddle Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Custom Mode Set-Up Info Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info” button on the touchscreen then use the left / right arrows to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems giving you a description of their operation and current configuration. Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.4L Example While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the “Custom Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the selectable options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen the individual current configuration will be displayed. Select which mode suits your driving needs for a custom driving experience. 4 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Horsepower — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged Engine • 700+ Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 700+ horsepower. NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED RKE Key Fob. • 500 Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 500 horsepower. NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or BLACK RKE Key Fob. Horsepower — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Transmission — If Equipped With 8 Speed Transmission • Track Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort trade-off. • Sport Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort trade-off. • Street Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving. Transmission 4 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Paddle Shifters • OFF Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable steering wheel paddle shifters. Traction Paddle Shifters • ON Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable steering wheel paddle shifters. Traction UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 • Track Suspension Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify traction control to optimize track performance with the least stability control. • Sport 4 Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off traction control and reduce stability control. • Street Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide full traction control and full stability control. Suspension • Track Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off. 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Sport Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a • Track firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort trade- Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the off. steering effort to the highest level. • Street • Sport Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for steering effort to the higher level. typical daily driving. • Street Press the “Street# button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the lowest level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the Launch Control and Shift Light features. Race Options Launch Control WARNING! Race Options Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used in a controlled environment, and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. 4 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL “Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM. Launch Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch bank (if activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen. NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless Launch Mode is deactivated. Activate Launch Control Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or pressing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank then selecting the“Race Options” button on the touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Press the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting and Operating”. Shift Light 4 Launch RPM Set-Up — Manual Transmission To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM. The launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic transmissions (1500–3500 RPM) and manual transmissions (2000–4500 RPM). Shift Light To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on the Driver Information Display (DID). Pressing the “Shift Light RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take you to the Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen. Shift Light RPM Set-Up The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift light to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8 (automatic transmission) 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5–6 (manual transmission). Pressing and releasing the up/down arrow buttons on the touchscreen above and below each listed gear, the RPM values will change in increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the arrows will change the RPM values in increments of 500 RPM, ranging from 2000– 6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup screen may only be accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to factory default” button on the touchscreen to change back to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off” button on the touchscreen to turn the system off completely. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric combination that will be easy to remember. Valet Mode While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification: • Engine limited to the lowest power output state. • Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal. • Traction, Steering, and Suspension are set to their STREET settings. • Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled. • The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock keypad. To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you • The ESC Off button is disabled. would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is • The Launch Control button is disabled. Valet Mode Activation 4 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Valet Mode Deactivation Valet Mode Deactivation PIN To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the faceplate, or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press Here to Exit” button on the touchscreen. The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle will return to the default state after a key cycle. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 NOTE: If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for ap- Transmission proximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in Default Mode. 4 Eco Mode Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT Drive Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or Located in the front storage area of the center console, vibration may be noticed while Eco is active. This is this feature allows an iPod®/MP3 player, or an external normal and a result of the increased amount of operating USB device, to be connected to the audio system. conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four cylinder shutoff mode (6.4L Only). The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode. • Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco. • Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is selected or “Eco” button is pressed. Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual. USB/AUX/SD Card Ports iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED 1 — Aux Jack This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be 2 — USB Port plugged into the USB port. 3 — SD Card UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s Manual. 4 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Media Mode between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next etc.). track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth®, SD Card). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the control is different depending on which mode you are in. previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the each mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from The button located in the center of the left-hand control your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does grammed in the radio preset button. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitturned down or off during mobile phone operation when ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some not using Uconnect® (if equipped). situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If Regulatory And Safety Information you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask USA/CANADA for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human 2. This device must accept any interference received, body. including interference that may cause undesired opThe internal wireless radio operates within guidelines eration. found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licommunity. cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilradio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy lage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout 4 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est • Increase the separation between the equipment and susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. receiver. NOTE: • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help. CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display. When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the radio or television reception, which can be determined display. by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 General Overview Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen. The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen. 4 Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by 1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information. switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button will turn off. Press and release to change the current airflow setting to 2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing 3. Recirculation Button this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting. indicator illuminates when ON. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 6. Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 7. Passenger Temperature (Uconnect® 8.4 Only) Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings. NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync. 4 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 8. Passenger Temperature Control (Uconnect® 8.4 Radio Only) Down Button 10. Blower Control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings. Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows: NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate automatically exit Sync. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise. when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. 9. SYNC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Button On The Touchscreen • Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con11. Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows: • Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. • Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. • Mix Mode Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions. 4 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 12. Climate Control OFF Button 14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only) Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. Provides the driver with independent temperature con13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide (Uconnect® 8.4 Only) the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for Provides the driver with independent temperature con- warmer temperature settings. trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperaNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. temperature settings. Climate Control Functions NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same A/C (Air Conditioning) time. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 button to turn off the air conditioning and manually MAX A/C adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforsure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. mance. NOTE: Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the • For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but when MAX A/C is ON. the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be of the windows. adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. needed. Recirculation • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from you may wish to recirculate interior air by behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric pressing the Recirculation control button. The front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. 4 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or butNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may tons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation is displayed, the system will achieve and automatifeature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen cally maintain that comfort level. greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this the system to function automatically. mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. NOTE: Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, Automatic Operation mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the as possible. “AUTO” button on the touchscreen. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this section of the manual. The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically. Manual Operation Override Operating Tips The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol. tions. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) 4 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winis not recommended because it may cause window dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild fogging. but rainy or humid weather. Vacation Storage NOTE: Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or of compressor damage when the system is started again. eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Outside Air Intake A/C Air Filter Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions. 4 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect® Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 or 8.4A/8.4AN system. 4 Uconnect® 8.4AN If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system. 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. Uconnect® Voice Command 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 — Push To End Call UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • Cancel to stop a current voice session 4 • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® Command must match exactly how the artist, album, and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only song and genre information is displayed. available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Media . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. 4 • Change source to Bluetooth® • Change source to iPod® • Change source to USB • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” . After the beep, say one of Push the Phone button the following commands: • Call John Smith • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) • Call back (call previous incoming phone number) Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Voice Text Reply Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push . After the beep, say: “Reply.” the Phone button PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES I’ll call you I need See you in later. directions. <number> of minutes. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. Thanks. TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit system prompts. UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later. Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsStart without No. I’ll be Late. free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep me. moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate Okay. Where are you? I will be <numcontrol.) ber> minutes Are you there Call me. late. yet? 4 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the VR button following commands: . After the beep, say one of the • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (If equipped). Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 1. To enter a destination, press the VR button the beep, say: . After • For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.” • For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” 4 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, press the VR button After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” . Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access, 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page. Roadside Assistance Call Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped. *Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and ***Extra charges apply. Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Register (8.4A/8.4AN) available; see coverage map for details. 1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch 9-1-1 Call touchscreen. Theft Alarm Notification 2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to Remote Door Lock/Unlock the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration. Stolen Vehicle Assistance Remote Vehicle Start** Remote Horn and Lights Yelp® Search Voice Texting 3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send. 4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle. Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed Remote Start.) Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN Mobile App 4 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® is: to process your message. 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and your Mopar® Owner Connect account at provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or moparownerconnect.com. hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy 2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.” number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your search for the Uconnect® Access App. voice to send a personalized text message. 3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is TIP: then connected to your mobile device. • Not compatible with iPhone®. Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) • Messages are limited to 140 characters. 1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After • The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be the beep, say the following command: “Send mesilluminated to use the feature. sage to John Smith.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN) Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you. 1. Press the VR button “Launch YELP.” . After the beep, say: 2. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, press the VR button , then say: “YELP search.” 3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Yelp® Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like Uconnect® to find. SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.) 4 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the VR button following commands: . After the beep, say one of the • Show fuel prices • Show 5 - day weather forecast • Show extended weather TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. SiriusXM Travel Link™ UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Additional Information Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET © 2014 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET Uconnect® System Support: • U.S. residents call DriveUconnect.com 1-877-855-8400 or visit • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .351 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .344 ▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .350 ! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .355 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .357 5 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 ! POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 ! AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ! FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . .385 ! ! ! ! ! PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . ▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ! BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . .383 . . . .385 . . . .386 . . . .386 . . . .388 . . . .389 . . . .389 . . . .392 . . . .392 . . . .393 . . . .394 STARTING AND OPERATING 341 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 ▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .404 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .407 ! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .421 ! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .412 ! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .421 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 ▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Tire Rotation — Same tire size on front and rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ Tire Rotation — Different tire size on front and rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ! TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .423 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ! VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .437 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .431 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 ! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .439 ! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 STARTING AND OPERATING 343 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Manual Transmission — If Equipped Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. WARNING! Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/STOP button is installed and the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ Key Fob is in the passenger compartment. Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Normal Starting seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/ Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button — OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the Automatic Transmission Only “Normal Starting” procedure. 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 5 346 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the 3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, release the button. vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. the engine starting, press the button again. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission Only accelerator pedal. Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission Only 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and 2. holding the ENGINE START/STOP button. 3. 2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 347 position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the 3. Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then Driver Information Display (DID) will display a “VEapply the parking brake. HICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the NOTE: PARK position, or it could roll. • If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF (engine not running) position and the transmission is in position. PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the • If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the OFF position. system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE the engine is not running. START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission Only • If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the 1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition START/STOP button. 5 348 STARTING AND OPERATING switch position will remain in the ACC position until 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position. the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK an externally powered electric engine block heater (availOr NEUTRAL Position) able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an If Engine Fails To Start ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without WARNING! starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF posi- • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into tion: the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire 1. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to causing serious personal injury. change the ignition switch to the ACC position, 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position, (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 349 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather# procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. 5 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission Only ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a If the engine fails to start after you have followed the standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather# proce- grounded, three-wire extension cord. dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal is located near the air box. Starting” procedure. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. STARTING AND OPERATING 351 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED Six-Speed Manual Transmission WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. CAUTION! • Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. • Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission. • Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage. • Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur. 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- NOTE: creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse warms up. This is normal. inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system. Manual Shifter • Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, you may hear your transmission. This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis- second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis- to fourth or from sixth to third gear. sion. Shifting CAUTION! Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage may result in transmission damage. to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator starting from a standing position. pedal when shifting. Recommended Shift Speeds The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel spring helps you know which gear you are in when you economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recomare shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second mended shift speed chart. or downshifting from sixth to fifth. The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine 6.2L Supercharged 6.4L MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS 1-4 4-5 mph 20 25 (km/h) (32) (40) mph 20 37 (km/h) (32) (59) 5-6 42 (67) 48 (77) Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less. Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can acceleration rate. press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear. 1–4 Skip Shift There are times when you must shift the transmission Downshifting directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downgear to second gear. This is to help you get the best shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs grade. when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING! Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You could have a collision. CAUTION! • If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch. • Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could damage the engine and/or clutch. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 356 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 357 CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while stopped or moving at low speeds. shifting out of PARK. Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Key Ignition Park Interlock Equipped This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park InterThe transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver (DID). avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. Automatic Transmission Shifter The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc. NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged The following indicators should be used to ensure that periods with the engine running. Apply the parking you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. tion: • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING! (Continued) practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to #AutoStick# in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as DRIVE (D) vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the This range should be used for most city and highway transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will position) enables full manual control of transmission inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Tog- In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission gling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select following steps. the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc. indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission Limp Home Mode gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired Transmission function is monitored electronically for location (preferably, at your authorized dealer). MANUAL (M) abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. STARTING AND OPERATING 365 This system can also provide you with more control 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, longer detected, the transmission will return to normal mountain driving, and many other situations. operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. 5 If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. AUTOSTICK Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature 1 — (–) Shift Paddle providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. 2 — (+) Shift Paddle 366 STARTING AND OPERATING Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted #M# (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel) to downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, (or tap the lever rearward (+) or tap the (+) shift paddle), to command an upshift. NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), while the shift lever is in DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, but the #M# will not be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below. • In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 367 • If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be over-speed, that shift will not occur. maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE, • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low or as described below. The transmission will not of a vehicle speed. upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is • Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the shift pressed to the floor. lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed. • The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when display the current gear. AutoStick is engaged. • The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver fault or overheat condition is detected. should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the vehicle is accelerated. DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking snowy or icy conditions. your foot off the accelerator pedal. 5 368 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. DRIVE MODES Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode feature. This feature gives the driver control over the systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation: Drive Modes • TRACK Mode — TRACK Mode is a pre-defined configuration optimized for typical track driving. The NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems Your Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these are all set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel modes. mounted paddle shifters are enabled. STARTING AND OPERATING 369 • SPORT Mode — SPORT Mode is a pre-defined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving. The ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are enabled. • CUSTOM — CUSTOM Mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite settings. The system will return to Default mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter setCustom Mode Set-Up tings may be configured through the custom mode Listed below is a description of each of these settings: set-up in any combination. Transmission (Trans) • Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the highest comfort trade-off. 5 370 STARTING AND OPERATING • Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a Suspension (Susp) moderate comfort trade-off. • Track — provides the firmest possible suspension • Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off. for typical daily driving. • Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with Paddles — If Equipped moderate comfort trade-off. • On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. • Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical daily driving. • Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. Steering — 6.4L Engine Only • Track — provides the greatest amount of steering feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering • Track — modifies traction control to optimize track effort. performance with the least stability control. • Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring • Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability greater steering effort. control. • Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and • Street — provides full traction control and full stability steering effort. control. Traction STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only • 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+ horsepower NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED RKE Key Fob “700+ HP”. (active dampening system) stiffness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT or TRACK settings within this mode. Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode as well. NOTE: The vehicle will restart with DEFAULT active if • 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500 DEFAULT was active when the vehicle was last shut horsepower down. NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or BLACK RKE Key Fob “500 HP”. • VALET — To enter Valet Mode the operator must select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predeter• DEFAULT — DEFAULT Mode will be activated automined, so the operator is free to select any four digit matically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet numeric combination that will be easy to remember. mode is active. This mode is for typical driving conWhile in Valet Mode the following vehicle configuraditions where the ABS and Transmission will be opertions are set and locked to prevent unauthorized ating in their STREET settings, which cannot be modification: changed while in this mode. The Steering (electric power steering — if equipped) assist and Suspension • Engine limited to a lowest power output state. 5 372 STARTING AND OPERATING • Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts • The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET earlier than normal. was active when the vehicle was last shut down. • Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to • Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies STREET settings. the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with accel• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled. eration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise • The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pressing the and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active, SRT button will display the unlock keypad. this is normal and will not damage the vehicle. • The ESC Off button is disabled. NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco. • The Launch Control button is disabled. NOTE: Launch Mode — If Equipped • To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pressing the SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the Uconnect® touchscreen. This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent STARTING AND OPERATING 373 quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this may cause damage to vehicle components and is not feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions recommended. may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems Automatic Transmission — If Equipped control resulting in an aborted launch. Launch Control is only available when the following NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500 procedure is followed: miles of engine break-in. 1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch Preconditions: bank. • Launch control should not be used on public roads. NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or Always check track conditions and the surrounding pressing the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen are area. two other options to access launch control features. • Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles Please refer to “Uconnect® Settings” within your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information. of the vehicle’s life. • Launch Control should only be used when the engine 2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your and transmission are at operating temperature. launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction. 5 374 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. touchscreen. Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will 4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving. return to its current ESC mode. 5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight. Launch control will abort before launch completion, 6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the “Drive”. following conditions: 7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator • The accelerator pedal is released during launch. pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line. Set-up” screen. NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system to another mode. Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions have not been met. NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will 8. When conditions 5 through 8 have been met, the return to its current ESC mode. Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch Ready Release Brake”. STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Manual Transmission — If Equipped 4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving. Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect® system. 5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight. Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed: 6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the vehicle is in first gear. 7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or “Launch RPM Set-up” screen. pressing the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen are two other options to access launch control features. NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information Please refer to “Uconnect® Settings” within your Own- Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the er’s Manual on the DVD for further information. above conditions have not been met. 1. Pressing the “LAUNCH” button on the center stack switch bank. 2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touch- 8. When conditions 5 through 8 have been met, the screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction. Ready Release Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and 3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen. 5 376 STARTING AND OPERATING continue to hold wide open throttle to launch execute • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the ESC shifts. Refer to “Manual Transmission – Shifting” in system to another mode. this section for further information. NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will Release the brake and continue to hold wide open return to its current ESC mode. throttle to launch. 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode. CAUTION! Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the transmission may occur. Launch control will abort before launch completion, Guidelines For Track Use display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered ESC Full ON under any the following conditions: during track use, any damage or wear associated with • The brake is applied during launch. track use is not covered by warranty. • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer • If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they moving in a straight line. will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving STARTING AND OPERATING 377 • • • • situations. It is recommended that your vehicle oper- • If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track it is recommended to remove it for track use during event. warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components. Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capactites” in Main- • All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of taining Your Vehicle for further information. endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear boots should be checked for wear or damage after brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remainevery track event. ing. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full pace. • Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped, At the conclusion of each track event, it is recomdriveline and brake system. This may affect noise mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to (NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle. maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your New components may need to be installed to return Brembo High Performance brake system. the system to the original NVH performance. It is recommended that each track outing should end • Tire pressure: with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal • 40psi hot, recommend 32psi front, 30psi rear cold braking. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi Hot Tire do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies. Pressure at the conclusion of each track session. Starting Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do at 32psi Front & 30psi Rear Cold and adjusting based on another cool down lap. ambient & track conditions is recommended. Tire pres3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap sure can be monitored via the Driver Information Display after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them (DID) and can assist with adjustments. smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect their life negatively in future track use. Track burnishing your brakes: 4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake 30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory rotors to cool to 200°F before going back out. installed components or when new brake friction com5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the ponents are installed: pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go 1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at more than half the thickness of the pad material 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max indicates too aggressive of a burnish. without ABS intervention. 2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then STARTING AND OPERATING 379 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce Acceleration speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipstep 2-4. pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull 7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should when there is a difference in the surface traction under be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city the rear (driving) wheels. miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track use. WARNING! 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further track use. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling. surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/ tions should be observed: centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. slushy. Traction • Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. • Keep tires properly inflated. • Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. CAUTION! • Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near parking blocks may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects. • Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm) deep may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects. STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 383 POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected NOTE: through the Uconnect® System. Refer to the “Drive • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer Modes” in this section for further information. operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial WARNING! increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for obtained as soon as possible. service. 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. STARTING AND OPERATING 385 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting • When the parking brake is applied and the transmisoff four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound driver inputs or additional driving skills required. to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. PARKING BRAKE When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake When the parking brake is applied and the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless on the transmission locking mechanism may make it Enter-N-Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru- difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is ment cluster will illuminate. not in the vehicle. 5 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission — If Equipped Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release STARTING AND OPERATING 387 WARNING! Automatic Transmission Parking Brake • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) 5 388 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light.” STARTING AND OPERATING 389 In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- models. mance braking system. The brake pads are a semiAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake vehicle stability and brake performance under most dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” operating conditions (.i.e., during light brake applica- the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. tions) this is considered normal conditions. The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic control of available braking forces applied to the rear brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This axle. system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 5 390 STARTING AND OPERATING When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some of the stop related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS. forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the WARNING! vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susstopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inceptible to interference caused by improperly include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose stalled or high output radio transmitting debris, or panic stops. equipment. This interference can cause possible You also may experience the following when the brake loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of system goes into anti-lock: such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop) • The clicking sound of solenoid valves • Brake pedal pulsations (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. (Continued) All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the 5 392 STARTING AND OPERATING brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on. If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for more information. If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not Brake Assist System (BAS) functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is This system complements the ABS by optimizing the required. vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking Traction Control System (TCS) situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appliThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is This can help reduce braking distances. STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. 5 394 STARTING AND OPERATING • Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual HSA Off transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in transmissions. the Uconnect® settings. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings# in • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., #Understanding Your Instrument Panel# for further inforvehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- mation. ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path. The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path STARTING AND OPERATING 395 does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents (Continued) The ESC system has four available operating modes: Street Mode This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. 5 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Sport Mode NOTE: Sport Mode is intended for times when a more spirited • To enter Sport ESC mode momentarily press the #ESC driving experience is desired. It is also can be useful Off# switch, or use the buttons on the Drive modes when wheel-slip may be desired such as driving out of pages in the radio. Pressing the #ESC off# switch again deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS with cycle through to Track ESC mode. Pressing the portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC #ESC off# button a third time will bring ESC back to activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what Street Mode. ESC normally allows. • To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with Track Mode snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Sport Track Mode is intended to be used when driving on a Mode” by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. track. This raises the threshold for ESC activation further Once the situation requiring “Sport Mode” is overthan Sport and also has track tuned TCS to improve come, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pressing vehicle performance while on a road course type track. the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING! When in “Sport/Track” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the limited wheel spin feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Sport/Track” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Full Off This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the #ESC OFF Indicator Light# will illuminate, and the “ESC off” message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. NOTE: The #ESC off# message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur when the message was previously cleared. WARNING! In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. $ESC Off$ mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only. 5 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: When the ESC is switched SPORT, the BLD system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Sport Mode” by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions. when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/ RUN position. It should go out with the engine STARTING AND OPERATING 399 NOTE: Synchronizing ESC • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. • Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 5 400 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE: Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. STARTING AND OPERATING 401 • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or $....blank....$ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 5 402 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – #R# means radial construction, or – #D# means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 403 EXAMPLE: – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 5 404 STARTING AND OPERATING Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week STARTING AND OPERATING 405 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 406 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. STARTING AND OPERATING 409 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or spare tires. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 5 410 STARTING AND OPERATING “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will NOTE: be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followis 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs ing table shows examples on how to calculate total (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your 650 lbs [295 kg]). vehicle with varying seating configurations and num5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load and load carry capacity of your vehicle. capacity calculated in step 4. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 411 5 412 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 413 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability ride. of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Tire Inflation Pressures response or over responsiveness in the steering. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the NOTE: driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause door. erratic and unpredictable steering response. At least once a month: • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality vehicle to drift left or right. pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual 5 414 STARTING AND OPERATING judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the may look properly inflated even when they are under- maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sideinflated. wall. CAUTION! Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. STARTING AND OPERATING 415 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and WARNING! within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires. equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). 5 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold additional information. driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeroads are covered with ice or snow. For more informadiately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and tion, contact an authorized dealer. service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or All Season Tires — If Equipped mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. tween different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on WARNING! the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury handling of your vehicle. or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or STARTING AND OPERATING 417 While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. checked before using these tire types. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi- Tire Spinning nal equipment tires. Use snow tires When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not only in sets of four; failure to do so spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or may adversely affect the safety and for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stophandling of your vehicle. ping. Snow Tires Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In was originally equipped with your vehicle and should Emergencies” for further information. not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 5 418 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is STARTING AND OPERATING 419 worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the with oil, grease, and gasoline. tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Replacement Tires tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replaceThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many ment. characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for • Distance driven. wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivahigher, and summer tires typically have a reduced lent to the originals in size, quality and performance tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading tenance schedule is highly recommended. 5 420 STARTING AND OPERATING Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 421 WARNING! (Continued) TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended. CAUTION! Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used. Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. CAUTION! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type 5 422 STARTING AND OPERATING tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain Tire Rotation — Same tire size on front and rear mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a axle smooth, quiet ride. The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rota- the following diagram. tion is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation. Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Tire Rotation — Different tire size on front and rear axle TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomshown in the following diagram. This method is required mended cold placard pressure. due to different size tires on the front and rear of the The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 vehicle. psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will Tire Rotation 5 424 STARTING AND OPERATING also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive sure. this information. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. STARTING AND OPERATING 425 CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.” 5 426 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver Information Display (DID), and and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. • TPM Telltale Light Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module, • Four TPM sensors, TPMS Display STARTING AND OPERATING 427 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the DID will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color. An #Inflate Tire to XX# message will also be displayed in the DID display. original color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition not being received. (those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflaproviding the system fault still exists. If the system fault tion value as shown in the #Inflate Tire to XX# message. no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the flash, and the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message will no system will automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will return the pressure values shown to their 5 428 STARTING AND OPERATING longer display, and a pressure value will display in place message is then followed with a graphic display with of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presfollowing: sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message is displayed. the TPM sensors. Vehicles With Compact Spare 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or the compact spare tire. wheel housings. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will The DID will also display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still message for a minimum of five seconds when a system display the low pressure values in a different color and fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is the #Inflate Tire to XX# message. detected. In this case, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# STARTING AND OPERATING 429 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the addition, the DID will display a #SERVICE TPM TPMS to receive this information. SYSTEM# message for a minimum of five seconds and General Information then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off following conditions: for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for a • This device may not cause harmful interference. minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) • This device must accept any interference received, in place of the pressure value. including interference that may cause undesired operation. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses: “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in MRXSSW4 the DID will display a new pressure value instead of United States dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada 2546A-SSW4 5 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, The 6.2L supercharged engine and 6.4L and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomengine is designed to meet all emissions mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speciregulations and provide excellent fuel fications if they are available. economy and performance when using Reformulated Gasoline high-quality premium unleaded gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner with an octane rating of 91 or higher. burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality. required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and before considering service for the vehicle. fuel system components. FUEL REQUIREMENTS STARTING AND OPERATING 431 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasogenates such as Ethanol. line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Operate in a lean mode. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. • Poor engine performance. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. 5 432 STARTING AND OPERATING To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some E-85 perform the following: vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer). without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, • Change the engine oil and oil filter. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal engine controller memory. and California reformulated gasoline. More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged Materials Added To Fuel exposure to E-85 fuel. All gasoline sold in the United States is required to MMT In Gasoline contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel. beyond gasoline of the same octane number without STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 5 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 435 CAUTION! Fuel Fill Cap NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door. • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap. • A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into the fuel system. • A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. (Continued) 5 436 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE: • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 437 VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) indicated. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. The label contains the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • Name of manufacturer The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear • Month and year of manufacture axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front 5 438 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect it is not over the GVWR. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. STARTING AND OPERATING 439 NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed TRAILER TOWING to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. and GAWRs. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow On Trailer Wheels OFF The Ground None Front Rear All NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED OK 5 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Manual Transmission — If Equipped Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur. Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur. CAUTION! CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .442 ! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .456 ! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .442 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 ! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .445 ! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 ! MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 ! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .465 ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .446 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .450 6 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the may wear down your battery. switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS panel. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • On the highways — slow down. traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition: other motorists. • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F (116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200– 230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F (116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 6 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m) M14 x 1.50 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 22 mm **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Torque Patterns Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you against the wheel. to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). 6 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk. Tire Service Kit Components Tire Service Kit Location 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode. 6 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. WARNING! • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. (Continued) 6 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. (Continued) Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451 on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated valve stem. tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the before proceeding. vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition nails) from the tire. in the OFF position. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The 4. Set the parking brake. Deflated Tire: (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Service Kit. Sealant Mode position. NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. from the fitting at the end of the hose. • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the deflated tire. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. 6 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and tire. the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Sealant Hose (6): Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt empty. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the Tire Service Kit. ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side use. Call for assistance. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes: hicle.” • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. CAUTION! NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. 6 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES (D) Drive Vehicle: (E) After Driving: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). Mode position. WARNING! Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3). If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) and loading information label on the driver-side door assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening. sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing. rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: Volt outlet. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the the vehicle. recessed area under the sealant bottle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose service center. of it accordingly. 6 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. housing. 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the precautions. housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place. CAUTION! 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 Preparations For Jump-Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting. 6 Remote Battery Posts Locations 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post 458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459 CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the disbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then charged battery. start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper battery. cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the in the reverse sequence: negative (-) post of the booster battery. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. the discharged battery. 6 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! (Continued) the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE with the discharged battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, spected at your authorized dealer. press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with CAUTION! automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without plugged in long enough without engine operation, spinning the wheels or racing the engine. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461 NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. NOTE: Press the #ESC Off# switch to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in #Partial Off# mode before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the #ESC Off# switch again to restore #ESC On# mode. CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 6 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available. Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual 4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the Park Release lever. lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right. 6 Console Storage Bin Locking Tab 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged base. position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position. 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. To Reset The Manual Park Release: Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) securely connected to a tow vehicle. rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever. 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position. 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console. Reinstall the console storage bin. Tether Strap WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Front Rear ALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • 30 miles (48 km) max distance NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED BEST METHOD MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • 30 miles (48 km) max distance NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED BEST METHOD 6 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. CAUTION! • Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper towing. • The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 Automatic Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following condiIf the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is tions: discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). out of PARK for towing. • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck. 6 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Manual Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .473 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 ! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .476 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 7 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 ▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .501 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .526 ▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .527 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 ▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .501 ! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 ▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .510 ▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .516 ! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 ! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 ! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 ▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .527 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 ! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 ! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 — — — — — — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) Intercooler Fluid Reservoir Engine Oil Fill Engine Coolant Pressure Cap Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Power Steering Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 12— Washer Fluid Reservoir 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI) 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) Engine Oil Dipstick Engine Oil Fill Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7— Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to 7 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE turn off the message. If the problem continues, the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replaceA loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not may also turn on the MIL. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which PROGRAMS you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. following: Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over. on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON system is ready for testing. position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine happen: may then indicate that the system is now ready. • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ento the I/M station. sure the designed performance. Damage or failures If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty. you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II 7 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES penalties being assessed against you. The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (.95 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range on these engines. 7 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Comparttime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaRefer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. tion. Change Engine Oil NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addiUse Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent tives. MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L Supercharged Engine (If Equipped) The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. tion. Engine Oil Viscosity Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a unique engine oil system. The system contains a drain in the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necessary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the engine oil change procedure. Failure to drain the engine oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine oil system. 7 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. WARNING! To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely lifted and supported to remove the front underbody shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to the Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly pan) removal and installation procedures. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Shaker Hood Oil Filler — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood” the upper scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly added to the engine. To do this you will need follow the procedure below: 1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in glove box. 2. Lift off the upper scoop. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to expose the Engine Oil Filter oil fill cap. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. 4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Engine Oil Filter Selection Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. 7 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING! mended. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required. near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting serious personal injury. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 WARNING! Battery Location • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). 7 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. A/C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. 7 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips. Filter Access Cover 3. Remove the used filter. Access Door 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. 4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Body Lubrication A/C Air Filter 5. Close the filter access cover. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a maintenance intervals. year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 7 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods flush out the residual water. may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some from a dry windshield. washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependrating information can be found on most washer fluid ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor containers. performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer have an authorized technician inspect the complete exfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams the Driver’s Information Display (DID). or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the WARNING! exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised Commercially available windshield washer solvents for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around WARNING! the washer solution. • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Exhaust System carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things system. To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; information. or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; (Continued) 7 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. (Continued) Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specificawith an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the tions, should be obtained immediately. exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated. age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. 7 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Checks Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™). The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless EnterN-Go™). • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle and/or the supercharger coolant recovery bottle (if equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine) tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Selection Of Coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). 7 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE: Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Material Standard MS.90032. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanneeded to be added to the system please contact your dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concenlocal authorized dealer. trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. mended and can result in cooling system damage. If • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionHOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant 7 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Caps The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING! • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. NOTE: Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant these caps are not interchangeable. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in When additional coolant is needed to maintain the puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground not overfill. spills immediately. Points To Remember Coolant Level NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the from the front of the engine compartment. This is norengine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. 7 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may expansion bottle must also be protected against freezresult in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) ing. performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System for leaks. In order to assure brake system performance, all brake • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically. minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals. protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. WARNING! • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 WARNING! (Continued) high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information. if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure. Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the (Continued) 7 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) — If Equipped The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Manual Transmission — If Equipped Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Fluid Level Check Selection Of Lubricant Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used Change Transmission Fluid in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi- be used. ately. See your authorized dealer for service. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. 7 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Special Additives Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions. any special additives in the transmission. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered check your transmission fluid level using special service product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools. mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle adversely affect seals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- Rear Axle sion damage. Fluid Level Check CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading. Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5mm below the fill plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Change Axle Fluid life of the vehicle. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- maintenance intervals. ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. 7 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion? Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. 7 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed. nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY mud or stone shields behind each wheel. MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish. match the color of your vehicle. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- Interior Care ner: Use MOPAR® Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting fabric upholstery and MOPAR® Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting. with a clean, dry towel. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, or MOPAR® Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery. cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomremove soap residue. mended for leather upholstery. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. 7 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear Cleaning Headlights quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. scratch the elements. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft directly on the mirror. cloth. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 7 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console. NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 CAUTION! Front Power Distribution Center Cavity 1 2 Cartridge Fuse – 40 Amp Green • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Mini-Fuse – – Description Fuse – Spare Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped 7 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 3 Cartridge Fuse 50 Amp Red Mini-Fuse – 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink – 20 Amp Blue – – – – – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 11 12 13 14 – – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red – – Description Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped Starter Electronic Stability Control Electronic Stability Control Fuse – Spare Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp – Police Horns Air Conditioning Clutch Fuse – Spare Fuse – Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 Cavity 15 16 18 19 Cartridge Fuse – – 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red Mini-Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow – – 20 21 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink – – 22 40 Amp Green / 20 Amp Blue – Police 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue – – 23 24 28 – – – Description Left HID – If Equipped Right HID – If Equipped Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) Wiper Motor Headlamp Washers – If Equipped / Police Feed Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped Police Bat Feed # 1 – If Equipped Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped Fuse – Spare 7 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 29 Cartridge Fuse – Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 – – – – – – – – – 25 Amp Clear – – 25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 38 39 – – 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Description Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police) Fuse – Spare Engine Module Fuse – Spare Fuse – Spare Powertrain #1 Powertrain #2 Anti-Lock Brake Module Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If Equipped Airbag Module Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 Cavity 48 Cartridge Fuse – Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 49 50 51 52 53 – – – – – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red – Description AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped Fuse – Spare Fuse – Spare Vacuum Pump Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped Fuse – Spare 7 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. Rear Power Distribution Center CAUTION! • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 Cavity 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow — 60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink — Mini-Fuse — — — — — — — — — — 20 Amp Yellow 15 16 17 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue — — — — Description Front PDC Feed #1 Fuse – Spare Front PDC Feed #2 Sunroof / Dome Lamp – Police Exterior Lighting #1 Exterior Lighting #2 Interior Lighting Power Locks Driver Door Control Module Passenger Door Control Module Dual USB Center Console Rear/ Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped HVAC Blower Left Spot Lamp – Police Fuse – Spare 7 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 18 19 20 21 22 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink — — 30 Amp Pink (6.2L Supercharged) 25 Amp Clear (LD STD) — 23 24 25 26 — — — — 27 — Mini-Fuse — — — — 20 Amp Yellow – Police 10 Amp Red – LA 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue – LD/LX 25 Amp Clear – LA 30 Amp Green – LA 6.2L Supercharged 25 Amp Clear Description Mod Network Interface – Police Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged) Fuel Pump (LD STD) Right Spot Lamp – Police Integrated Center Stack – LA Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port Integrated Center Stack – LD/LX Tire Pressure Monitor Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX) Fuel Pump (LA) Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged) Amplifier – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Cavity 31 32 33 Cartridge Fuse — — — Mini-Fuse 25 Amp Breaker 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 34 — 10 Amp Red 35 36 — — 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue 37 38 — — 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue – LD/LX 20 Amp Yellow – LA 40 — — Description Power Seats HVAC Module/Cluster Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/ Steering Column Lock-LX If Equipped Steering Column Module/Clock/ Spare – Police Battery Sensor Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped Radio Console Power Outlet/Console Media Hub (LD/LX) Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/ Console Media Hub (LA) Fuse — Spare 7 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 41 42 43 Cartridge Fuse — 30 Amp Pink — Mini-Fuse — — 20 Amp Yellow 44 — 10 Amp Red 45 — 15 Amp Blue 46 47 — — — 10 Amp Red 48 49 50 — — — 20 Amp Yellow — — Description Fuse — Spare Rear Defrost Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel Module Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LDLX)/Humidity Sensor Fuse — Spare Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day Time Running Lamps- If Equipped Active Suspension – SRT Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Cavity 51 52 Cartridge Fuse — — Mini-Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 53 — 10 Amp Red 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 — — — — — — — — — — 10 Amp Red — — — 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow — — Description Front Heated Seats – If Equipped Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor Airbag Module (LA) Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Airbag Module (LD/LX) Adjustable Pedals – Police Heated Washer Nozzles (LD) Cigar Lighter (LA) – If Equipped Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare 7 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 64 65 66 67 68 Cartridge Fuse — — — — — Mini-Fuse 25 Amp Breaker 10 Amp Red — 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 69 70 — — — — VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery. • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Description Rear Windows (LD/LX) Airbag Module Fuse — Spare Rain and Light Sensor/Sunroof Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear Sunshade (LD/ LX) Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement. Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped 194 Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions. 7 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exterior Bulbs Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) Halogen Headlamp Front Park/Turn Lamp Front Fog Lamp Front Side Marker Tail Lamp Stop/Turn Lamp Rear Side Marker Backup Lamp Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) License Bulb Number D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) * HIR2LL LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) * The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 BULB REPLACEMENT 4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove. NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and disconnect. conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually 6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect. accelerate the clearing process. 7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and then reinstall headlamp cover. Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen To replace the driver side lamps: Headlamps — If Equipped To replace the passenger side lamps: 1. Open the hood. 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and then rotate cover off to the side. 2. Remove the headlamp cover. 3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly. NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to point. the side. 7 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and and access the rear of the headlamp assembly. Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped 4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly. HID Headlamps 5. Remove the headlamp cover. The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. 6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the remove. headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of 7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and discon- this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to nect. an authorized dealer for service. 8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect. 9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise and then reinstall headlamp cover. 10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly. WARNING! A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp Center Tail/Backup Lamp The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable assembly, see your authorized dealer. separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. License Lamp The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. 7 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil With Filter 6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) Cooling System * 6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) Intercooler (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to U.S. 18.5 Gallons Metric 70 Liters 6 Quarts 7 Quarts 5.68 Liters 6.6 Liters 15 Quarts 14.4 Liters 4.5 Quarts 4.2 Liters 15 Quarts 14.4 Liters MAX level. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine/Intercooler Coolant Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032. For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane or higher. 7 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Power Steering Reservoir – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Rear Axle Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR® LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 8 534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE: conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil anytime a malfunction is suspected. if it has been six months since your last oil change, The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is even if the oil change indicator message is NOT time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. illuminated. The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. oil change is necessary. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a as required. scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by master cylinder, and power steering, and add as referring to the steps described under “Driver Informaneeded. tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Panel” for further information. operation. At Each Stop For Fuel At Each Oil Change • Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Change the engine oil filter. hicle” for further information. • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if CAUTION! required. Once A Month • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. 8 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Or Kilometers: 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 150,000 42,000 30 70,000 144,000 36,000 24 60,000 138,000 30,000 18 50,000 132,000 24,000 12 40,000 126,000 18,000 6 30,000 120,000 12,000 Or Months: 20,000 114,000 6,000 108,000 Miles: 10,000 102,000 Maintenance Chart Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled maintenance. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 Or Kilometers: 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. X Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. X X X X X X X X 150,000 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 X X X 250,000 96,000 90 144,000 90,000 84 240,000 84,000 78 138,000 78,000 72 230,000 72,000 66 132,000 66,000 60 220,000 60,000 54 126,000 54,000 48 210,000 48,000 42 120,000 42,000 36 200,000 36,000 30 114,000 30,000 24 190,000 24,000 18 108,000 18,000 12 180,000 12,000 6 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537 X 8 X X X X X X X X X X X 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Or Kilometers: Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped). X X X X X 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 X X X X X X X X X 250,000 240,000 230,000 220,000 210,000 200,000 190,000 180,000 150,000 144,000 138,000 132,000 126,000 120,000 114,000 108,000 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 X 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Or Kilometers: Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary. Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing. X X X X 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 X 250,000 240,000 230,000 220,000 210,000 200,000 190,000 180,000 150,000 144,000 138,000 132,000 126,000 120,000 114,000 108,000 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 X 8 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Or Kilometers: Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 X X X X X X X 250,000 240,000 230,000 220,000 210,000 200,000 190,000 180,000 150,000 144,000 138,000 132,000 126,000 120,000 114,000 108,000 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Or Kilometers: Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Supercharged Engine ** X X X X X X X X X X X X 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 X X X X X X Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary X 250,000 240,000 230,000 220,000 210,000 200,000 190,000 180,000 150,000 144,000 138,000 132,000 126,000 120,000 114,000 108,000 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 X X 8 Or Kilometers: 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine ** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not done at 150,000 miles (240,000 km). ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. 150,000 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 250,000 96,000 90 144,000 90,000 84 240,000 84,000 78 138,000 78,000 72 230,000 72,000 66 132,000 66,000 60 220,000 60,000 54 126,000 54,000 48 210,000 48,000 42 120,000 42,000 36 200,000 36,000 30 114,000 30,000 24 190,000 24,000 18 108,000 18,000 12 180,000 12,000 6 102,000 6,000 Or Months: 170,000 Miles: 10,000 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .548 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .548 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .552 9 546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 547 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the 9 548 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 423-6343 They want to know if you need assistance. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621 center. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French ter should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 549 Mexico, D. F. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. 9 550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551 campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are dealer, and the manufacturer. available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), operating at its best. or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. MOPAR® PARTS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ 9 552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests manuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety and/or components is written in straightforward lantips. guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553 Call toll free at: Treadwear • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades. mance. 9 554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 556 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .154 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .482 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Alarm Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 INDEX 557 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .310 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .364 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 10 558 INDEX Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .474 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .82 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .81 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 INDEX 559 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .76 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .72 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .496 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 .497 .496 .496 .493 .504 .154 .210 .547 .250 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 10 560 INDEX Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Dipsticks Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Door Locks Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Driver Information Display DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .510 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .149 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Emergency, In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .474 INDEX 561 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Filler Location Fuel . . . Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . Air Conditioning . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 .321 .481 .481 10 562 INDEX Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .529 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Adding . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . Clean Air . . . . . . . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Gasoline . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . Requirements . . . . . Specifications . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 .432 .430 .431 .434 .430 .221 .432 .431 .430 .430 .529 .528 .434 .510 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 INDEX 563 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information . . . . . . Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . Gross Axle Weight Rating . . Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 .135 .508 .137 .139 .138 .135 .139 .134 .137 .488 .488 .128 .128 .110 .350 .139 .393 .194 10 564 INDEX Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 iPod® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Key Fob Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 INDEX 565 Keyless Entry System . . . Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . Key, Replacement . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 .12 .17 .12 .16 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 10 566 INDEX Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .221 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .142 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .221 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .221 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 .476 .534 .221 .552 .351 .501 INDEX 567 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 10 568 INDEX Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .408 Power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .206 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 .496 .308 .307 .306 .145 .191 .210 .181 INDEX 569 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .307 Remote Starting Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .267 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 10 570 INDEX Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Seat Belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .51 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 INDEX 571 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .221 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 10 572 INDEX Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .307 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .54 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .318 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .407 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 INDEX 573 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 .221 .553 .415 .419 .421 .400 .401 .417 .417 .418 .400 .445 .132 .439 .465 .439 .439 .379 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 10 574 INDEX Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .267 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .264 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .221 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 INDEX 575 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 15D492-126-AD Fourth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. 2015 Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat Chrysler Group LLC 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project